2009 CHALLENGER
CHALLENGER
Chrysler LLC
81-226-0916
Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2009
147914 Dodge LC22 Challenger.indd 1 9/8/08 3:39:42 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 71
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................149
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................239
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
.............................................337
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................363
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................417
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................433
10
INDEX
...................................................................443
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. Please take
the time to read these publications carefully. Following
the instructions and recommendations in this manual
will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual.
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ............ 12
▫ FOB With Integrated Key ............... 13
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 14
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 16
▫ General Information ................... 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm ................... 18
▫ Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 18
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 18
䡵 Illuminated Entry System ................. 19
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 20
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 22
▫ Express Down Window Feature ........... 23
2
9
▫ To Open The Trunk .................... 23
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 23
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 24
▫ Transmitter Battery Service .............. 24
▫ General Information ................... 25
䡵 Remote Starting System .................. 26
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 26
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 28
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 28
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 29
䡵 Windows ............................ 32
▫ Power Windows ...................... 32
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 33
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ................. 34
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning ................... 35
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ............... 35
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 37
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 41
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ................. 42
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 42
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped .... 44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 44
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 45
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags .......... 45
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 55
▫ Child Restraint ....................... 57
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 66
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 67
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 67
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 67
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle............................. 68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
OutsideTheVehicle ................... 69
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Fob and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
with an integral ignition switch. You can insert the
double-sided integrated key into the ignition switch with
either side up.
Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go
feature, for more information, refer to “Keyless Go — If
Equipped” under “Starting Procedure” in Section 5 of
this manual.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the ON position.
1 — LOCK
2 — ACCESSORY
3—ON
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fob With Integrated Key
The Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emer-
gency key, which stores in the rear of the Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key from the Fob, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your
other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the key.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the
ignition switch.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmit-
ters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the trans-
mitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones,
pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interfer-
ence with this system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron-
ics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the first key.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound
and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for three seconds, and then turn off.
The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE trans-
mitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-
grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the head-
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle SecurityAlarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if both doors are closed, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In
addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro-
cess. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle SecurityAlarm after
closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-
described arming sequences.
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
•
None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held radio transmitter. The transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the
ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will
continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five
seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
RKE Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. Refer to “Remote
Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Turn
Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Per-
sonal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),” un-
der “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turned on or turned off. Refer to “Sound Horn with
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter
for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds.
Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the
LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Express Down Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and then
immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until
the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
To Open The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times
within five seconds to open the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
operation.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position)
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
•
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the key into
the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON
position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to
drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will display in the
EVIC until you insert the key. Once inserted, the
message “Turn To On” will display in the EVIC until
you turn the key to ON.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message “Push Button/Insert Key” will display in the
EVIC until you push the START button.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and either door is open, the power locks
will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
locking the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, the key is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the
LOCK orACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder
to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
4. The throttle is pressed
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK
4. The driver door is opened
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Unlock Doors Automati-
cally on Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Place the key in the ignition switch.
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the
engine.
4. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE:
•
The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
•
You can remotely lower both the driver side and
passenger side windows at the same time. Refer to
“Remote Keyless Entry/Express Down Window Fea-
ture” in this section.
Power Window Switches
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down fea-
ture. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off
to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to mini-
mize the buffeting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Trunk Release button on the Re-
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter twice within five seconds.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release
Button
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
Emergency Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the
front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and
the supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window. If you will be
carrying children too small for adult-sized belts, your
seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child
restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt
is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch plate
will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plate
and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Latch Plate
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snug.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have it
fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around
the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snug and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Air-
bags in this section). Like the front airbags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Seat Belt
Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will continue to
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec-
onds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating
the BeltAlert威.
1. With both doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this pro-
cedure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tion. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver side front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger side front
airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the
glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are em-
bossed on the airbag covers.
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to open them. You may damage the
airbags and you could be injured because the airbags
are no longer functional. These protective covers for
the airbag cushions are designed to open only when
the airbags are inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
This vehicle is also equipped with supplemental side
curtain airbags (located above the side windows) to
protect the driver and passenger sitting next to a window.
Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Side Window Airbag
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the side curtain
airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
•
Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain
airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many
types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in
moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. The supplemental
side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will
also trigger in moderate-to-severe side collisions. How-
ever, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck-
led up in the rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to
information on Child Restraint in this section.)
3. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section.)
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door, as the airbags will inflate
forcefully into the space between you and the door.
9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
This vehicle has supplemental side curtain air-
bags, and they need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
•
Side Door Pressure Sensors
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-
dows
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Seat Belt Reminder Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
detect rollover.
•
The ORC also determines if a side impact is severe
enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag
as required for each type of impact.
•
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON position. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will
not inflate.
•
The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start-up.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
•
The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli-
sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
driver front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in
the sides of the airbag. The passenger front airbag gas
is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag.
In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your
control of the vehicle.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
•
The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions. When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators
on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic
gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window.
The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about
one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes)
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This espe-
cially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is
only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC
detects a moderate-to-severe collision to help restrain the
driver and front passenger and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine.
•
Flashes hazard lights.
•
Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlocks the doors automatically.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or frame.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight
second interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
Acopy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
upon request. General data that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved,
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product,
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant, or
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact velocity and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
cle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a
plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section. A
locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic
locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap
belt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor
is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling
all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web-
bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-
pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
the retractor.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended
viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors.............................. 75
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 75
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 75
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .......... 76
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 76
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 77
▫ VanityMirrors ....................... 77
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .............. 77
▫ Slide-On-Rod And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor .............................. 77
䡵 uconnect威 phone — If Equipped ............ 78
▫ Operation .......................... 80
▫ Phone Call Features ................... 88
▫ uconnect威 phone Features ............... 91
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............ 96
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect威 phone ...................... 98
▫ General Information .................. 106
3
71
䡵 Voice Recognition (VR) System —
If Equipped .......................... 106
▫ Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation . . . 106
▫ Commands ........................ 108
▫ VoiceTraining .......................111
䡵 Seats ...............................111
▫ Easy Entry Seats ......................111
▫ Power Seats ........................ 112
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline ........... 113
▫ Lumbar Support ..................... 114
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 114
▫ Heated Seats ....................... 115
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 116
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 117
䡵 Lights ............................. 119
▫ Headlight Switch .................... 119
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 120
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) ................ 120
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................. 120
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 121
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 121
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 121
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 122
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights .... 123
▫ InteriorLights ...................... 123
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 125
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 125
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 126
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 126
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) ................ 126
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 127
䡵 Electronic Speed Control ................ 128
▫ To Activate ......................... 129
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................ 129
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 130
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 130
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 130
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 131
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 132
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 132
▫ Sunglasses Storage ................... 132
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 133
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 134
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 137
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 137
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button ................... 138
▫ Security ........................... 138
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 138
▫ General Information .................. 139
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 139
▫ Opening Sunroof — Partially ............ 140
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 140
▫ Closing Sunroof — Partially ............. 140
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 141
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 141
▫ Pinch Protect Override ................ 141
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 141
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 141
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 142
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 142
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 142
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 142
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 142
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 144
▫ Front Cupholders .................... 144
▫ Rear Cupholders ..................... 145
䡵 Console Features ...................... 146
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest .......... 146
▫ Console Storage ..................... 146
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 147
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 147
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward, and normal.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Power Mirror Control
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
this section, for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Slide-On-Rod and Extender Features of Sun Visor
To use the slide-on-rod feature of the sun visor, rotate the
sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated uconnect威 phone. Refer to your “Navigation
User’s Manual” for uconnect威 phone operating instruc-
tions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located
on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.
uconnect威 phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. uconnect威 allows you to
dial a phone number with your cellular phone using
simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or
⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the
system will automatically mute your radio when using
the uconnect威 phone.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect威 website for sup-
ported phones.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the sys-
tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The uconnect威 phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect威 phone
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect威 phone. The uconnect威 phone allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
The uconnect威 phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
uconnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
you may not be able to use any uconnect威 phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The uconnect威 phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect威 phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect威 phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect威
phone and to navigate through the uconnect威 phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect威 phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
uconnect威 phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The uconnect威 phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect威 phone from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect威 phone sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect威 phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect威 phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions
for pairing.
The following are general phone to uconnect威 phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect威 phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect威 phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect威 phone. The priority
allows the uconnect威 phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect威 phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The uconnect威 phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the uconnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The uconnect威 phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect威 phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect威 phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect威
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the uconnect威 phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the uconnect威 phone.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the uconnect威 phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to uconnect威 phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect威
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect威 phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the uconnect威 phone is playing the desired entry
and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the uconnect威 phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The uconnect威 phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect威 phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect威 phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect威 phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press
the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the call,
press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two
calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG-
NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect威 phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect威 phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the uconnect威 phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the uconnect威 phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
uconnect姞 phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect威 phone is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every uconnect威 phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect威 phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect威 phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The uconnect威 phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect威 phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect威
phone.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the uconnect威 phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect威 phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect威 phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
When calling a number with your uconnect威 phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The uconnect威 phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect威 phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect威 phone will play
the current confirmation prompt status and you will
be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the uconnect威 phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using uconnect威 phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect威 phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The uconnect威 phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect威 phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect威 phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect威 phone:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the uconnect威 phone:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect威 phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect威 phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect威 phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect威 phone or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-
OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect威 phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect威 phone paired cellular
phone and the uconnect威 phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The uconnect威 phone will play the phone names of all
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect威 phone.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
uconnect威 phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete uconnect威 phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect姞
phone
uconnect威 phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the uconnect威 phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect威 phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect威 phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙)for⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect威 phone.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect威 phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and say
your command.
Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted,
and after the beep, you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR button and
say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Commands
The Voice Recognition (VR) system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-
tion (VR) system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for VR is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the VR button to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR button, say “System Setup” and once you
are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train
your own voice to the system and will improve recogni-
tion.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Easy Entry Seats
Pulling upward on the lever, located on the seatback, allows
the seatback to dump forward and the seat to slide forward.
You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the
guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out
of the way. This allows for easier access to the rear seat.
Easy Entry Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Power Seats
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. The power seat switch can be moved
forward and backward as well as up and down to control
the position of the seat. The power seatback switch is
used to adjust the angle of the seatback. Push forward or
rearward on the switch to change the position of the
seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Control
2 — Power Seatback Control
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then lean
back to the desired position and release the handle.
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of a rear impact. Adjust the restraint so that the
upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull upward
on the head restraint. To lower it, press the button on the
post guide and push downward on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support
Adjustable Head Restraint
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated. The
heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and
seatback. The controls for each heater are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If high level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu-
ous operation. At that time, the number of indicators
illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Folding Seat
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure the hood latch is
fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights, parking lights, or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Delay Turning Headlights Off,” under “Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off
the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con-
tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the in-
strument panel lights and, if
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door
handles and cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. The multifunction lever is lo-
cated on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are six delay settings, which allow you to
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle
every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release the
multifunction lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
Tilt Steering Column
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the right-
side of the steering wheel, operates the system.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
Electronic Speed Control Lever
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located
on the end of the Electronic Speed Control
lever. The indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate to show that the speed
control system is on. To turn the system off, push and
release the ON/OFF button again. The system and the
indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
•
Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
equipped).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•
Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different
size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
•
Softly tap the brake pedal.
•
Press the brake pedal, or press the clutch pedal to the
floor (manual transmission).
•
Pull the speed control lever toward you (CANCEL).
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the lever in
RESUME ACCEL. When the lever is released, a new set
speed will be established.
Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in
a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is
tapped speed increases, so tapping the lever three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set
speed will be established.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a
1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is
tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climb-
ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink威) button and a power sunroof switch may
also be included, if equipped.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
Overhead Console
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Partially
Press and hold the switch in the rearward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Partially
Press and hold the switch in the forward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off
to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-Volt electrical power outlets on this
vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The front 12-Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is ON. This power outlet will also
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: If desired, the front power outlet can be con-
verted by your authorized dealer to provide power with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adapter.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped
The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
to “Interior Lights” under “Lights” in Section 3.
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide con-
venient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain-
ing a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
CONSOLE FEATURES
Sliding Center Console Armrest
The center console armrest slides forward with three
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use,
and shifting ease.
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12-Volt power
outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various
size coins). The center console may also be equipped with
a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI). UCI supports
Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and iPhone威 devices.
Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If
Equipped” in Section 4 for further information.
Sliding Console Armrest
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 153
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base ............... 154
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium ............ 155
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description ............ 156
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 168
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays........................... 170
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System ....... 171
▫ Trip Functions ...................... 172
▫ Keyless Go Display — If Equipped ........ 175
▫ Compass Display .................... 175
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped ........................ 177
▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features) .......................... 178
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 178
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . 182
4
149
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 182
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play) ............ 187
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 189
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMAPlay) .................... 191
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 192
䡵 Sales Code (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
Radio – If Equipped .................... 194
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 194
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone
— If Equipped ...................... 194
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ............... 194
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ............... 197
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 197
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 200
▫ NotesOnPlayingMP3Files ............ 202
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 205
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio............................... 205
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 206
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 211
▫ NotesOnPlayingMP3Files ............ 213
▫ ListButton(CDModeForMP3Play) ...... 216
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 216
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped .......................... 217
▫ Connecting The iPod威 ................. 218
▫ Using This Feature ................... 218
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using
Radio Buttons ....................... 218
▫ PlayMode ......................... 219
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................. 220
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES
Radios Only) ......................... 222
▫ System Activation .................... 222
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 223
▫ Selecting uconnect威 studios
(Satellite) Mode ..................... 223
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 223
▫ Reception Quality .................... 224
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite) Mode ..................... 224
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 226
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
If Equipped .......................... 227
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 228
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 229
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 230
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlets 5 — Heated Seat Switch 9 — Ignition Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — ESP OFF Switch 10 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Glove Compartment 7 — Hazard Warning Switch 11 — Headlight Switch
4 — Radio 8 — Climate Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Trip Odometer Button
Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
Base Cluster
The word ⬙Trip⬙ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles (km). A
second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is on.
5. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. The
light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, turns on while driving, or stays on,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos-
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
for more information).
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
15. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt
Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check
or when driving.
17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
Only
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Area
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify the mileage the
vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer
reading is changed because of repair or replacement, be
sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the
service so that the correct mileage can be determined.
Vehicle Warning Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
warning messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ......................Fuel Saver Indicator
Check gascap ........Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Lo tirE ......................LowTirePressure
Change Oil ................OilChange Required
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in this section for more information.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving
habits and vehicle usage.
Check gascap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check gascap” message will display in the odometer
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Lo tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
Change Oil Message (Base Cluster)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following pro-
cedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the
MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK
to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
26. Door Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door
may be ajar.
27. Decklid Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that the decklid may be
ajar.
28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer
fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass Display
•
Outside Temperature Display
•
Trip Computer Functions
•
uconnect™ phone (If Equipped)
•
uconnect™ gps Screens (If Equipped)
•
Audio Mode Display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-
Selectable Surround [DSS])
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, uconnect™ gps
(If Equipped), System Warnings, System Sta-
tus, Personal Settings, and Surround Sound (If
Equipped).
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also functions as a remote sound system con-
trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”
in this section.
SCROLL Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, uconnect™ gps
(If Equipped), System Status Messages, and
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features). The SCROLL button also functions as a remote
sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System
Controls” in this section.
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
screen will display radio and media mode
information depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
•
Left/Right Door Ajar
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Oil Change Required
•
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
•
Channel # Transmit
•
Channel # Training
•
Channel # Trained
•
Clearing Channels
•
Channels Cleared
•
Did Not Train
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime)
•
ESP Off – Electronic Stability Program is deactivated
•
ECO – Fuel Saver Indicator
•
Check Gascap
•
Key FOB Battery Low
•
Service Keyless System
•
Wrong Key
•
Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
“Remote Starting System” in Section 2)
•
1–4 SKIPSHIFT
•
Stereo (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound [DSS])
•
Audio Surround (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
•
Distance To Empty
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history informa-
tion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from
the last fuel average reading before the reset.
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
Fuel Saver Mode — On
Fuel Saver Mode — Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-
tion. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window.)
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Keyless Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Go icon
momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the
new ignition switch position.
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
always re-appears.
Compass Display
COMPASS Button
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature.
Keyless Go Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-
mation on the current surround mode.
•
Stereo
•
Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-
TION SELECT button to change surround modes.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices.
•
Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
•
Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE).
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
Language
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you con-
tinue, the information will display in the selected lan-
guage.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the uconnect™ lan-
guage selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under
“uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlamps Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“HSA (Hill Start Assistance)” under “Electronic Brake
Control System” in Section 5 of this manual for system
function and operating information. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, uconnect™ phone (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,”
“45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.”
appears.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “MET-
RIC” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
REQ Radio
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio to the radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMAfiles; however, acceptable
MP3/WMAfile recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, and
CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For uconnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
SALES CODE (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
RADIO – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your uconnect威 tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect威 gps — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
RES/RSC Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect威. For sales code
RER, REN and REZ touch-screen radio UCI feature, refer
to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is
available only if equipped as an option with these radios.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port located in the
center console.
•
Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port located on the center
console. Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle’s UCI system (iPod威 may take a few
seconds to connect), the iPod威 starts charging and is
ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described
below.
NOTE:
•
You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
ing the cable.
•
If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using the optional connection cable to connect an
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod威 and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
•
Preset1–Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 - Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting uconnect姞 studios (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 studios
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kicker威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-
round audio if desired.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
VOLUME Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
Remote Sound System Controls
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
FUNCTION SELECT Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to operate various radio, media, and
Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or start
playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio
is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
SCROLL Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have copyright encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The Manual Temperature Control consists of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner pushbuttons.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(Off) position. There are four blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator) for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Mode Control
Use this control to choose from several
patterns of air distribution. You can
select either a primary mode as iden-
tified by the symbols on the control, or
a blend of two of these modes.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel and the center console. These outlets can be
adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the instrument panel, center
console and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, and Floor or a blend of these modes, even
if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
necessary.
•
Recirculation Control
Use this button to block the flow of outside air
from coming into the passenger compartment.
A light will illuminate when the system is in
recirculation mode. Use the recirculation mode
to provide maximum A/C performance in hot ambient
conditions, or to block outside odors, dust, etc.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather may cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
Air Conditioning Control
Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A
light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning
System is engaged.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for a few seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time and set the temperature control
to full cool by rotating the temperature control knob full
counterclockwise.
•
Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Remote Start – If Equipped
During remote start operation, the climate control soft-
ware may override the climate control settings depend-
ing on the outside ambient temperature. The table below
explains the different scenarios that could occur during
remote start operation.
Once the driver enters the vehicle, the control will return
to the customer selected settings. This feature was de-
signed to ensure maximum comfort during extreme
conditions. To enable the feature, customers must park
their vehicles with the blower control set in any of the
four blower speeds.
If Outside Ambient
Temperature Is
Mode Overrides To Temperature Overrides To Rear Window Defroster
Active
Less than 40°F Mix Full Heat Yes
Between 40°F and 80°F No Override No Override No
More than 80°F Bi-Level Full Cool No
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
The feature can be disable by parking the vehicle with
the blower control set to the “O” (or OFF) position.
•
For maximum performance, it is recommended that
the vehicle is parked with the blower control set to the
“High” (full clockwise) position.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this
manual for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be used
for long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel
and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for filter service intervals.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 243
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 243
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .... 244
▫ Keyless Go — If Equipped .............. 245
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 246
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) ............... 248
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 249
▫ After Starting ....................... 250
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 250
䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........ 251
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission .......... 251
䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 255
▫ General Information .................. 255
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 257
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override .......................... 257
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.5L Engine) ....................... 259
5
239
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L
Engine) ........................... 264
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 264
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 268
▫ AutoStick威 Operation ................. 268
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 269
▫ Acceleration ........................ 269
▫ Traction ........................... 270
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 270
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 271
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 273
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 273
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 274
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 275
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .... 276
䡵 Brake System ........................ 277
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped .......................... 277
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS) (If
Equipped) – 5.7L Engine Only ............. 280
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 280
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) — If
Equipped .......................... 280
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) — If
Equipped .......................... 281
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) — If Equipped . . . 281
▫ HSA (Hill Start Assist) — Manual
Transmission Only ................... 283
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) — If
Equipped .......................... 284
▫ Synchronizing ESP ................... 287
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light ............... 287
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 288
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 288
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 293
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 297
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 297
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 298
▫ Radial Ply Tires ..................... 300
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ....... 300
▫ TireSpinning ....................... 301
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 302
▫ LifeOfTire ........................ 303
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 303
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 304
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 306
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 306
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 307
▫ Base System ........................ 310
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ......... 312
▫ General Information .................. 316
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 316
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engines (With Automatic
Transmission) ....................... 316
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) .... 317
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 317
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 317
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 318
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 319
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 319
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 319
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 320
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 321
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 321
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 323
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 323
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 323
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 324
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 324
▫ Overloading ........................ 324
▫ Loading ........................... 325
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 325
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 325
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 328
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ..................... 329
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 329
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 330
▫ TowingTips ........................ 335
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 336
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-
tion system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting with Integrated Key — Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con-
verter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. See Section 6 of this manual for
jump-starting instructions.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Go — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter
is in the passenger compartment.
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for regular ignition key use.
2. Insert the metal part of the valet key under the chrome
bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the button
loose.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position.
Normal Starting
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Automatic Transmission Only
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Manual Transmission Only
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, press and hold the clutch pedal while
pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle
fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10
to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proce-
dure. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, release the button.
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shifter
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
•
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position the
system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
position.
•
If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
to the OFF position.
Keyless Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF the
Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK or NEUTRAL
Position)
The Keyless Go feature operates similar to an ignition
switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, ON/RUN and
START. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps.
•
Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-starting proce-
dures and follow them carefully.
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 sec-
onds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
•
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in this
section.
•
Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result
in damage to the clutch and transmission.
•
Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission syn-
chronizer damage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting
from a standing position.
Manual Shifter
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom-
mended shift speed chart.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
Axle
Ratio
1-4 4-5 5-6
3.73
mph 20 25 42
(km/h) (32) (40) (67)
3.91
mph 20 37 48
(km/h) (32) (59) (77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete
stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE
with the ignition key ON, as compared to the ignition
key OFF position. This is normal operation of the
transmission reverse inhibitor system.
•
Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis-
sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at 1/4 throttle or less.
The 1–4 Skip Shift indicator message will be displayed
during these times.
When the 1–4 Skip Shift indicator message is displayed,
the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear
to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission to fourth
gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have an accident.
CAUTION!
•
If you skip more than one gear while downshift-
ing or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
•
Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle
is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you
could damage the engine and/or clutch.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
tomatically, dependent upon:
•
Altitude
•
Vehicle loading
•
Driving style
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
•
Shift lever position
•
Accelerator position
•
Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
•
After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
•
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Trans-
mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
•
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key is removed from the ignition, the transmis-
sion shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children inside a vehicle.
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal
operation.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position and the engine is not running. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
be turned to any other ignition position (ACC, ON/
RUN) position, and the brake pedal must be pressed
whether or not the engine is running.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully
remove the override cover which is located to the right of
the shift lever.
1. Turn the key to the ACC or ON position without
starting the engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
through the access port on the center console.
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
Interlock Manual Override
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Keyless Go — If Equipped
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or ON/RUN
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the in-
structions shown above to activate the override.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission (3.5L
Engine)
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK to ON position.
REVERSE
This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis-
sion damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
“D” (Overdrive)
This range is used for most city and highway driving. It
provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the
best fuel economy. Select the “3” range when frequent
transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive
range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing heavy trailers).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera-
ture. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” later in this section.
•
If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en-
gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
“3” (Third)
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmis-
sion will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while in
this range. The “3” position should also be used when
descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis-
tress.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
“L” (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than in other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
incline without applying the brakes. These practices
can cause overheating and damage to the transmis-
sion.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usu-
ally after 1–3 miles [1.6–4.8 km] of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever
into the “3” position will show that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
normal condition and it will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within
five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear
position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. This reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK.
•
Turn the key to LOCK, then start the engine.
•
Shift into DRIVE and resume driving.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diag-
nostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L Engine)
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans-
mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK to ON position.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling
into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers, use
the ERS or AutoStick威 mode and select the “3” range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-
ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the
transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever into the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick姞 Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage Autostick威, simply
move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in
the DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the
instrument cluster. In Autostick威 mode, the transmission
will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is
manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift
(D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. To
disengage Autostick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the
Autostick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is en-
gaged.
•
The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
•
Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when
Autostick威 is engaged.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
(LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of
wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
The “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on when the parking brake is applied and the
ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position (automatic transmission), R (Reverse) or
first gear (manual transmission) first and then apply the
parking brake.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Parking Brake
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations, and
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-
phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
(Continued)
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light”
monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is
required.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) (IF
EQUIPPED) – 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESP (Electronic Stability Program).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission
models.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) — If Equipped
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. For
more information about ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock Brake
System” in Section 5.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
TCS (Traction Control System) — If Equipped
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a
limited-slip differential (LSD) and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section for more information.
BAS (Brake Assist System) — If Equipped
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli-
cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA (Hill Start Assist) — Manual Transmission
Only
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSAwill maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
•
Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal.
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESP OFF” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
20 seconds. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” should turn
on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) — If Equipped
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-
tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
The ESP system has two available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF”
switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illumi-
nate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the
“ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will turn off.
ESP OFF Switch
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP
OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momen-
tarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
running.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
NOTE:
•
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
CAUTION!
Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels,
as this can result in rear axle damage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure
—
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure
information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1—WornTire
2 — New Tire
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on
P215/65 R17, P225/60 R18, and P235/55 R18 size tires.
The 245/45 R20 size tires do not provide adequate
clearance for tire chains.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Use on rear wheels only.
•
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
turer if different from the speed recommended by
the manufacture.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug-
gest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for any-
thing causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing
the tire rotation.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will auto-
matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale
Light.”
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors, and
•
TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors,
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
•
TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with low pressure (including
those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC
will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.5L and 5.7L Engines (with Automatic
Transmission)
The 3.5L and 5.7L engines (with automatic
transmission) are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum
performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
5.7L Engine (with Manual Transmission)
The 5.7L engine (with manual transmis-
sion) is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents
or other additives is not needed under normal conditions
and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you
should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emissions control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal-
functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.
If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service. Contact
your authorized dealer for service assistance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Cap — Base Model
Fuel Filler Cap — R/T Model
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM-
ETER button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in Section 7.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label.” This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
reational vehicle dealer for additional
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
ClassI-LightDuty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.5L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
age your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-
mation” for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-
tion” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Re-
placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) or Autostick威 mode (if
equipped) to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing” in the Maintenance Schedule. Refer to Section 8 for
the proper maintenance intervals.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Autostick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS)
−
By using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) or
Autostick威 mode and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
range should be selected that allows for adequate
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, put transmission in
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 338
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 338
䡵 TIREFIT Tire Repair — If Equipped ........ 339
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 345
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ........ 345
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 347
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire ............ 348
▫ Compact Spare Tire ................... 352
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation
(If Equipped) ....................... 353
䡵 Jump-Starting ........................ 356
䡵 FreeingAStuckVehicle ................. 359
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 360
▫ Without The Ignition Key .............. 360
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ........................... 360
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
WithATowDolly.................... 361
6
337
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument
panel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116 °C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. TheA/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the Temperature Control to maxi-
mum heat, the Mode Control to floor and the Fan
Control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap”
paragraph.
TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel in
the trunk.
1. Air pump hose
2. Power plug and cable
3. AIR PUMP switch
4. Pressure gauge
5. TIREFIT sealant bottle
6. TIREFIT sealant hose
TIREFIT Location
TIREFIT Kit
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or repairing a tire.
•
Cuts or punctures larger than approximately
0.16 in (4 mm), tire damage caused by driving with
extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a
damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving.
TIREFIT should not be used in such circum-
stances. Do not drive the vehicle under such cir-
cumstances. Contact your nearest authorized
dealer for assistance.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin
should be flushed immediately with plenty of
water. If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
•
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immedi-
ately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physi-
cian immediately.
•
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
Sealing Tire with TIREFIT
1. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or in gear (manual transmission), turn OFF the
engine and set the parking brake.
3. Remove the TIREFIT kit from the trunk.
4. Pull the power plug 2 and the TIREFIT sealant hose 6
out from the TIREFIT kit.
5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated
tire.
6. Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose 6
coming from the sealant bottle 5 onto the tire valve.
7. Insert the power plug 2 into the power point on the
instrument panel.
8. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK (automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL (manual
transmission) and start the engine.
9. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the sealant bottle 5 through
the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 and into the tire.
10. Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then
read the pressure gauge 4. If the tire inflates to 26 psi
(1.8 bar) or greater, proceed to Step 19 of this procedure.
If not, proceed to the following step.
11. Press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF). Then,
disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it
back in the vehicle.
12. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back
and forth approximately 30 ft (9.1 m) to distribute the
sealant more evenly within the tire.
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
13. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
14. Move the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or in gear (manual transmission), turn OFF the
engine and set the parking brake.
15. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside
of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open.
16. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
17. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK (automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL (manual
transmission) and start the engine.
18. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within five minutes. If the tire inflates to this level,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If a tire pressure of
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not obtained within five minutes, the
tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
19. With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi (1.8 bar)
press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the
engine. Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from the
tire and place it back in the vehicle.
20. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for
approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribu-
tion of the tire sealant within the tire.
21. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
22. Move the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or in gear (manual transmission), turn OFF the
engine and set the parking brake.
23. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside
of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
24. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
25. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure
gauge 4. If the pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or greater,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If the pressure is
less than 19 psi (1.3 bar), the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
26. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK (automatic transmission) or gear (manual trans-
mission) and start the engine.
27. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar by pressing
the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON) and watching the
pressure gauge. When the tire pressure is set to the
pressure indicated on the tire pressure label, press the
AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine.
28. Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and
reinstall the valve cap.
29. Place the sealant kit back in the trunk of the vehicle.
Replace the sealant bottle at your nearest authorized
MOPAR威 parts dealership.
30. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at
an authorized dealer or tire service center.
NOTE:
•
If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot be
maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
•
Do not operate the electric air pump for more than
eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump may
be used again once it has cooled down.
•
Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle 5 once every four
years to assure optimum operation of the system.
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried,
it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
•
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire has
been inspected.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire.
Opening The Access Panel
Spare Tire Fastener
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jack Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
(Continued)
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
Center Cap Removal
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the
procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa-
tion” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure.
Jack Engagement Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage.Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
pressure.
•
This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation (If
Equipped)
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage.Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the
center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the center cap.
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contami-
nated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
•
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12-Volts.
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
sion in PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL), and
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both
vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine com-
partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic
Stability Program⬙ in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in
the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after
starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Jump-Starting
1 — Negative Engine Ground
2 — Remote Positive Post
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
•
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spin-
ning the wheels, is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program,” or “Traction Control” in Section 5.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles is permitted within the following
limitations:
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km)
•
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h)
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmis-
sion failure.
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to
be towed more than 15 miles (24 km), the vehicle must be
transported using a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flatbed truck. Otherwise, damage to the trans-
mission may result.
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L ............. 366
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L ............. 367
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 368
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap ................. 368
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 369
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 370
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 371
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 371
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 372
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 375
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 376
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 376
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 378
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 379
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 380
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 380
7
363
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 381
▫ Cooling System ..................... 384
▫ Brake System ....................... 389
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual
Transmission (If Equipped) ............. 392
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 392
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .... 393
▫ Rear Axle .......................... 394
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 395
䡵 Fuses .............................. 400
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) .......... 400
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center .......... 403
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 407
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs ................ 408
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 409
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models With
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped ....... 409
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models
With High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped ............. 409
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ........... 409
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp .............. 410
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp .............. 412
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) .......................... 413
▫ License Lamp ....................... 413
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Coolant Pressure Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler LLC dealer-
ship or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.5L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for for all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” under “Starting and
Operating” for more details.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-
neered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle (automatic transmission only).
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
or which may occur by leaving the top of your
master cylinder reservoir uncovered or the top off
of the brake fluid bottle off, allowing it to absorb
moisture may result in sudden brake failure dur-
ing hard prolonged braking. You could have an
accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container (both as to bottles and the master
cylinder remaining covered) to avoid contamina-
tion from foreign matter or moisture. Brake fluid,
unlike many other fluids, actually absorbs mois-
ture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the fluid and may cause it to boil during hard
braking and create a soft pedal pressure resistance
as the gas compresses. This condition does not
apply adequate pressure to the brakes to function
properly.
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid, all brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or complete
brake failure leading to a crash.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the
correct fluid type.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be at the
bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain
the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid
type.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi-
ately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear Axle
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Integrated Power Module
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Washer Motor
2 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
3 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Ignition Run/Start
4 — 25 Amp
Neutral
EGR Solenoid/
Alternator
5 ———
6 — 25 Amp
Neutral
Ignition Coils/Injectors
7 ———
8 — 30 Amp
Green
Starter
9 ———
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
10 30 Amp
Pink
— Windshield Wiper
11 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves
12 40 Amp
Green
— Radiator Fan Lo/High
13 50 Amp
Red
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor
14———
15 50 Amp
Red
— Radiator Fan
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
16———
17———
18———
19———
20———
21———
22———
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Access Panel
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
CAUTION!
•
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear
Power Distribution
Center contains a black
IOD fuse needed for
vehicle processing dur-
ing assembly. The ser-
vice replacement part is
a 60 Amp yellow car-
tridge fuse.
2 40 Amp
Green
— Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM)
3 ———
4 40 Amp
Green
— Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM)
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
5 30 Amp
Pink
— Heated Seats - if
equipped
6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
7 — 15 Amp
Blue
Sub Amp - if equipped
8 — 15 Amp
Blue
Diagnostic Link Connec-
tor (DLC)/Wireless Con-
trol Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
10———
11 * ———
12 * ———
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
13 * ———
14 — 10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security Mod-
ule - if equipped
15———
16———
17 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cluster
18 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Selectable Power Outlet
19 — 10 Amp
Red
Stop Lights
20———
21———
22———
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
23———
24———
25———
26———
27 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC)
28 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run
29 — 5 Amp
Orange
Cluster/Electronic Sta-
bility Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
30 — 10 Amp
Red
Door Modules/Power
Mirrors/Steering Con-
trol Module (SCM)
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
31———
32———
33———
34———
35 — 5 Amp
Orange
Antenna Module - if
equipped/Power Mir-
rors
36 — 25 Amp
Clear
Hands-Free Phone - if
equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
37 — 15 Amp
Blue
Transmission
38 — 10 Amp
Red
Cargo Light/Vehicle In-
formation Module - if
equipped
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
39 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors - if
equipped
40 — 5 Amp
Orange
Auto Inside Rearview
Mirror/Heated Seats - if
equipped/Switch Bank
41———
42 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Blower Motor
43 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Window Defroster
44 20 Amp
Blue
— Amplifier/Sunroof - if
equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-
rized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
window switch, and the passenger power window
switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps .............W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp .............562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............578
Visor Vanity Lamps .....................A6220
Glove Box Lamp .........................194
Door Courtesy ..........................562
Shift Indicator Lamp .................JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket / Cupholder
Lighting ..............................LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (HID).........................D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp ....................9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp...................3157A
Front Fog Lamp .....................9145/H10
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker ........................168
Tail Lamp ............................3057K
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp ...................3057K
Rear Side Marker ........................168
Backup Lamp ...........................921
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) .............................LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License................................168
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side
to disengage the clip.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
NOTE:
•
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp
assembly.
4. Pull back the trunk liner.
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.
14. Close the trunk.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.5 Liter Engine 18 Gallons 68 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 6.0 Quarts 5.7 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7.0 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.5 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil (3.5L Engine) Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil (5.7L Engine) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (3.5L Engine) ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection (3.5L and 5.7L Engine
— Automatic Transmission)
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine —
Manual Transmission)
91 Octane Preferred
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid
Rear Axle (3.5L Engine) MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 (API GL-5) or equiva-
lent.
Rear Axle (5.7L Engine) MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5) or equivalent
(with MOPAR威 Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control
System. These, and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change
Required” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 or under “Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” under “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in Sec-
tion 4.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped), add as necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. †
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
96 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.5L Engine).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped), add as necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (3.5L/5.7L Engines).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped), add as necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 435
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 435
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 435
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 435
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 435
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center .......... 436
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 436
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 436
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 437
▫ Service Contract ..................... 437
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 438
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 438
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 438
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C............................... 438
▫ In Canada ......................... 439
䡵 Publication Order Forms ................ 439
9
433
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized selling dealer. They know your vehicle the
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized deal-
ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus-
tomer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service con-
tract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
443
About Your Brakes ....................274,277
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............277,280
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........386
Adding Fuel ...........................321
Adding Washer Fluid .....................380
Additives, Fuel .........................319
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 376
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............378
Air Conditioning ........................230
Air Conditioning Controls .................230
Air Conditioning Filter ....................236
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............237
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............378,379
Air Conditioning System ................230,378
Air Pressure, Tires .......................298
Airbag ................................45
Airbag Deployment .....................50,52
Airbag Light .....................51,54,68,158
Airbag Maintenance .......................54
Airbag, Side ..........................46,51
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) .............46,51
AlarmLight ...........................164
Alarm, Panic ............................23
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................223
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........385,386,414
Disposal ............................387
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............277,280
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............166,279
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Appearance Care ........................395
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) .........18
Assistance Towing ........................93
Auto Down Power Windows ................33
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................30
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................75
444 INDEX
Automatic Door Locks .....................30
Automatic Headlights ....................120
Automatic Oil Change Indicator .............162
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives ......................394
Automatic Transmission .............259,264,393
Adding Fluid ......................393,416
Autostick ............................268
Fluid and Filter Changes .................393
Fluid Change .........................393
Fluid Level Check .....................393
FluidType ...........................416
Gear Ranges .........................259
Overdrive ...........................261
Shifting ..........................259,264
Special Additives ......................394
Torque Converter ......................262
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . 263,267
Autostick .............................268
AxleFluid .............................416
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............416
Battery ...............................376
Emergency Starting .....................356
Jump Starting .........................356
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......24
Location ..........................357,376
Belts, Seat ............................37,68
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............379
B-Pillar Location ........................293
Brake Assist System ......................281
Brake Control System, Electronic .............280
Brake Fluid ............................416
Brake, Parking ..........................274
Brake System ........................277,389
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................277,280
Fluid Check .......................390,416
Master Cylinder .......................390
10
INDEX 445
Parking .............................274
Warning Light .....................163,277
Brakes .............................277,389
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............257
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........66
Brightness, Interior Lights ..................124
Bulb Replacement .....................408,409
Bulbs,Light..........................69,408
Calibration, Compass .....................176
Capacities, Fluid ........................414
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................321
Oil (Engine) ..........................374
Power Steering ........................273
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............387
Car Washes ............................395
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............67,320
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................323
Cellular Phone ..........................78
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............413
Certification Label .......................323
Chains, Tire ............................304
Changing A Flat Tire .....................345
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................290
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............369
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............67
Checks, Safety ...........................67
Child Restraint ..................57,58,59,62,63
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............60,62
Clean Air Gasoline .......................317
Cleaning
Wheels .............................397
Windshield Wiper Blades ................380
Climate Control .........................230
Clock ........................183,194,198,207
Cold Weather Operation ...................248
446 INDEX
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............229
Compact Spare Tire ......................300
Compass ..............................175
Compass Calibration .....................176
Compass Variance .......................176
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................172
Connector
UCI ................................217
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........217
Conserving Fuel ........................172
Console ..............................146
Console, Floor ..........................146
Console, Overhead .......................132
Contract, Service ........................437
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........387
Cooling System .........................384
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............386
Coolant Capacity ......................414
Coolant Level ......................384,388
Disposal of Used Coolant ................387
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................385
Inspection ...........................388
Points to Remember ....................388
Pressure Cap .........................387
Radiator Cap .........................387
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......385,414,415
Corrosion Protection .....................395
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............128
CruiseLight ...........................156
Cupholders .........................144,399
Customer Assistance .....................435
Data Recorder, Event ......................55
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ...........124
Daytime Running Lights ...................121
Dealer Service ..........................371
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................35
Deck Lid, Power Release ...................34
10
INDEX 447
Defroster, Rear Window ...................147
Defroster, Windshield ................69,232,233
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................125
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................368
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................123
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..........................372
Power Steering ........................273
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................360
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............387
Engine Oil ...........................375
Door Locks .............................28
Door Locks, Automatic ....................30
Door Opener, Garage .....................133
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................269
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................270
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy ....172
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................76
Electrical Power Outlets ...................142
Electronic Brake Control System .............280
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ....403
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......128
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............284
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......157
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....168
Emergency Deck Lid Release ................35
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............359
Hazard Warning Flasher .................338
Jacking .............................345
Jump Starting .........................356
Overheating ..........................338
Towing .............................360
Emergency Trunk Release ...................35
448 INDEX
Emission Control System Maintenance ......369,418
Engine ............................366,367
Air Cleaner ..........................376
Block Heater .........................250
Break-In Recommendations ................66
Checking Oil Level .....................372
Compartment ......................366,367
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................384,415
Cooling .............................384
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................67,320
Fails to Start ..........................249
Flooded, Starting ......................249
Fuel Requirements .....................316
Jump Starting .........................356
Multi-Displacement ....................280
Oil ...........................372,414,415
Oil Change Interval ..................162,373
Oil Filler Cap .........................374
OilFilter ............................375
Oil Filter Disposal .....................375
OilSelection .......................373,414
Oil Synthetic .........................375
Overheating ..........................338
Starting .............................243
Temperature Gauge ....................157
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................374
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........53
Entry System, Illuminated ..................19
Ethanol ...............................317
Event Data Recorder ......................55
Exhaust Gas Caution ................67,320,382
Exhaust System .......................67,381
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................76
Exterior Lighting ........................119
Exterior Lights ..........................69
Filler Location Fuel ......................321
10
INDEX 449
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................376
Air Conditioning ......................236
Engine Oil ........................375,415
Engine Oil Disposal ....................375
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................338
Turn Signal ......................69,122,158
Flash-To-Pass ...........................123
Flat Tire Changing .......................345
Flooded Engine Starting ...................249
Fluid, Brake ...........................416
Fluid Capacities .........................414
Fluid Leaks .............................69
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................393
Brake ..............................390
Cooling System .......................384
Engine Oil ...........................372
Power Steering ........................273
Fluids ................................415
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........415
FogLights ..........................121,160
Folding Rear Seat ........................116
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................359
Fuel .................................316
Adding .............................321
Additives............................319
CleanAir ............................317
Conserving ..........................172
Ethanol .............................317
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................321
Gasoline ............................316
Gauge ..............................156
Materials Added .......................319
Methanol ............................317
Octane Rating ......................316,415
Requirements .........................316
450 INDEX
Saver Mode ..........................172
Specifications .........................415
Tank Capacity ........................414
Fuel Optimizer .........................172
Fuel Saver .............................172
Fuel System Caution .....................322
Fueling ...............................321
Fuses ................................400
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........133
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............321,368
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................317
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................316
Conserving ..........................172
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................317
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................157
Fuel ...............................156
Odometer ...........................161
Speedometer .........................156
Tachometer ..........................156
Gear Ranges ...........................259
General Information ...............17,25,106,316
General Maintenance .....................371
Glass Cleaning ..........................399
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............324,326
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............324,325
GVWR ...............................324
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) ...............78
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................270
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................338
Head Restraints .........................114
Headlights ............................409
Automatic ...........................120
Bulb Replacement ......................409
10
INDEX 451
Cleaning ............................398
Delay ..............................120
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........123
Lights On Reminder ....................121
On With Wipers ....................120,126
Passing .............................123
Switch ..............................119
TimeDelay ..........................120
Heated Mirrors ..........................77
Heated Seats ...........................115
Heater ...............................230
Heater, Engine Block .....................250
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 123
Hill Start Assist .........................283
Hitches
TrailerTowing ........................328
Holder,Cup ...........................144
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 133
Hood Release ..........................117
Ignition ...............................13
Key...............................12,13
Ignition Key Removal .....................13
Illuminated Entry ........................19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................14
Infant Restraint ........................57,58
Information Center, Vehicle .................168
Instrument Cluster ....................154,156
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............153
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............399
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............400
Interior Appearance Care ..................398
InteriorLights ..........................123
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........125
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ...........................345
Jack Operation ..........................348
Jacking Instructions ......................348
452 INDEX
Jump Starting ..........................356
Key, Programming ........................16
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................14
Key-In Reminder .........................14
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keyless Go .......................12,175,245
Keys .................................12
Kicker Sound System .....................227
Knee Bolster ............................45
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............122
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................37
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren) ....................60,62
Latches ................................69
Hood ...............................117
Lead Free Gasoline ......................316
Leaks, Fluid ............................69
LifeofTires ............................303
LightBulbs ..........................69,408
Lights ..............................69,119
Airbag ........................51,54,68,158
Alarm ..............................164
Anti-Lock .........................166,279
Automatic Headlights ...................120
Brake Assist Warning ...................287
Brake Warning .....................163,277
Bulb Replacement ...................408,409
Center Mounted Stop ...................413
Courtesy/Reading ...................123,132
Cruise ..............................156
Daytime Running ......................121
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............122,123
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 287
Electronic Throttle Control Warning .........157
Engine Temperature Warning ..............159
10
INDEX 453
Exterior ..............................69
Fog .............................121,160
Hazard Warning Flasher .................338
Headlight Switch ......................119
Headlights ........................119,409
Headlights On Reminder .................121
Headlights On With Wipers ............120,126
High Beam ........................123,160
High Beam Indicator ....................160
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............123
Illuminated Entry .......................19
Instrument Cluster ..................119,156
Intensity Control ......................124
Interior ..........................123,132
License .............................413
Lights On Reminder ....................121
Low Fuel ............................166
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........166
Map Reading ......................123,132
Oil Pressure ..........................160
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .........124
Passing .............................123
Reading ..........................123,132
Seat Belt Reminder .....................160
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..............164
Service ...........................408,409
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 166
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..............164
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........164,307
Traction Control .......................287
Turn Signal ......................69,122,158
VanityMirror..........................77
Voltage .............................157
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....156
Loading Vehicle ......................323,325
Capacities ...........................325
Tires ...............................293
Locks .................................28
454 INDEX
Auto Unlock ..........................30
Automatic Door ........................30
Door ................................28
Power Door ...........................29
Low Tire Pressure System ..................307
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) .....................60,62
Lubrication, Body .......................379
Lumbar Support ........................114
Maintenance Free Battery ..................376
Maintenance, General .....................371
Maintenance Procedures ...................371
Maintenance Schedule ....................418
Maintenance, Sunroof .....................142
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 166,369
Manual, Service .........................439
Manual Transmission ...............251,392,394
Fluid Level Check ...................392,394
Map/Reading Lights ..................123,132
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................390
Methanol .............................317
Mini-Trip Computer ......................172
Mirrors ................................75
Automatic Dimming .....................75
Electric Powered .......................76
Electric Remote ........................76
ExteriorFolding ........................76
Heated ..............................77
Outside ..............................75
Vanity ...............................77
Mode
Fuel Saver ...........................172
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............307
Mopar Parts .........................370,438
MTBE/ETBE ...........................317
Multi-Displacement Engine System ...........280
10
INDEX 455
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............122
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................66
Occupant Restraints .......................36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............316,415
Odometer ..........................156,161
Trip .............................156,161
Oil Change Indicator ..................162,171
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............162,171
Oil, Engine .........................372,415
Capacity ............................414
Change Interval ....................162,373
Checking ............................372
Dipstick .............................372
Disposal ............................375
Filter ............................375,415
Filter Disposal ........................375
Identification Logo .....................374
Materials Added to .....................375
Recommendation ...................373,414
Synthetic ............................375
Viscosity .........................374,414
Oil Filter, Change ........................375
Oil Filter, Selection .......................375
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............368,369
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........133
Operating Precautions ....................368
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................75
Overdrive .............................261
Overhead Console .......................132
Overheating, Engine ...................158,338
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........439
PaintCare .............................395
Panic Alarm ............................23
Parking Brake ..........................274
Parking On Hill .........................275
456 INDEX
Passing Light ...........................123
Personal Settings ........................178
Pets ..................................65
Phone, Cellular ..........................78
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威)...............78
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........293
Power
Brakes ..............................277
Deck Lid Release .......................34
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...............403
Door Locks ...........................29
Mirrors ..............................76
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........142
Seats ...............................112
Steering .............................273
Sunroof .............................139
Windows .............................32
Power Steering Fluid .....................416
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............44
Preparation for Jacking ....................347
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................42
Programmable Electronic Features ............178
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................20
Radial Ply Tires .........................300
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........387
Radio Operation ........................230
Radio Remote Controls ....................228
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) ...........222
Rear Cupholder .........................145
Rear Seat, Folding .......................116
Rear Window Defroster ...................147
Rear Window Features ....................147
Recorder, Event Data ......................55
Recreational Towing ......................336
Reformulated Gasoline ....................317
10
INDEX 457
Refrigerant ............................379
Release, Hood ..........................117
Reminder, Lights On .....................121
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................42
Remote Control
Starting System ........................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........228
Remote Starting System ....................26
Remote Trunk Release .....................34
Replacement Bulbs .......................408
Replacement Keys ........................16
Replacement Parts .......................370
Replacement Tires .......................303
Reporting Safety Defects ...................438
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ..............162
Restraint, Head .........................114
Restraints, Child .........................57
Restraints, Occupant ......................36
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................359
Rotation, Tires ..........................306
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................68
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............69
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................438
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................67
Safety Information, Tire ...................288
SafetyTips .............................67
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................223
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) ...........222
Schedule, Maintenance ....................418
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................399
Seat Belt Reminder .......................42
Seat Belts ..........................36,37,68
And Pregnant Women ...................44
Child Restraint ...................57,58,59,63
Extender .............................45
Front Seat ..........................37,38
458 INDEX
Inspection ............................68
Operating Instructions ...................38
Pretensioners ..........................42
Rear Seat .............................37
Reminder ............................160
Untwisting Procedure ....................41
Seats .................................111
Adjustment ..........................111
Head Restraints .......................114
Heated .............................115
Height Adjustment .....................112
Lumbar Support .......................114
Power ..............................112
Rear Folding .........................116
Seatback Release .......................116
Tilting ..............................112
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........385,415
Selection of Oil .........................373
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................14
Sentry Key Programming ...................16
Sentry Key Replacement ...................16
Service Assistance .......................435
Service Contract .........................437
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................166
Service Manuals ........................439
Setting the Clock ................183,194,198,207
Settings, Personal ........................178
Shift Indicator Light ......................254
Shifting ...............................255
Automatic Transmission ............255,259,264
Shoulder Belts ...........................37
Side Airbag ...........................46,51
Side Curtain (Window Airbag) ...............46
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..........236
Signals, Turn ......................69,122,158
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............269
10
INDEX 459
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................304
Snow Tires ............................306
Sound System
Kicker ..............................227
Spare Tire ..........................300,345
Spark Plugs ............................415
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................415
Oil ................................415
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............128
Speedometer ...........................156
Starting .............................26,243
Automatic Transmission .................244
Cold Weather .........................248
Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............356
Engine Fails to Start ....................249
Remote ..............................26
Starting and Operating ....................243
Starting Procedures ......................243
Steering
Column Controls ......................122
Column Lock .........................127
Power ..............................273
TiltColumn ..........................127
Wheel, Tilt ...........................127
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................228
Storage ...............................407
Storage, Vehicle ......................235,407
StoringYourVehicle ......................407
Stuck, Freeing ..........................359
Sun Roof ..............................139
Sunglasses Storage .......................132
Sunroof Maintenance .....................142
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........45
Sway Control, Trailer .....................326
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................375
System, Remote Starting ....................26
460 INDEX
Tachometer ............................156
Telescoping Steering Column ...............127
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......157,339
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............60
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Tilt Steering Column .....................127
Time Delay, Headlight ....................120
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........293
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............292
Tire Markings ..........................288
Tire Safety Information ....................288
TIREFIT ..............................339
Tires ............................69,297,440
Aging(LifeofTires) ....................303
Air Pressure ..........................297
Chains ..............................304
Changing .........................345,348
Compact Spare ........................300
Flat Changing ........................345
General Information ....................297
High Speed ..........................299
Inflation Pressures .....................298
Jacking ...........................347,348
LifeofTires ..........................303
Load Capacity .....................293,294
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........307
Pressure Warning Light ..................164
Quality Grading .......................440
Radial ..............................300
Replacement .........................303
Rotation ............................306
Safety ...........................288,297
Sizes ...............................290
Snow Tires ...........................306
Spare Tire ...........................345
Spinning ............................301
TrailerTowing ........................332
10
INDEX 461
Tread Wear Indicators ...................302
To Open Hood ..........................117
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............329
Torque Converter Clutch ..................262
Towing ...............................325
24-Hour Towing Assistance ................93
Behind a Motor Home ..................336
Disabled Vehicle .......................360
Guide ..............................329
Recreational ..........................336
Weight..............................329
Towing Assistance ........................93
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home .........336
Traction Control .........................281
TrailerTowing ..........................325
Cooling System Tips ....................336
Hitches .............................328
Minimum Requirements .................330
Tips................................335
Trailer and Tongue Weight ...............329
Wiring ..............................333
TrailerTowingGuide .....................329
TrailerWeight ..........................329
Transfer Case
Fluid ...............................416
Transmission ...........................393
Automatic ...................255,259,264,393
Fluid ...............................416
Manual .............................251
Range Indicator .......................259
Shifting .............................255
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink威) ...........................133
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........20
462 INDEX
Transporting Pets ........................65
Tread Wear Indicators ....................302
Trip Odometer .......................156,161
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ....................34,35
Trunk Release, Emergency ..................35
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............34
Turn Signals .........................122,158
UCI Connector .........................217
uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) ...............78
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................440
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 217
Universal Transmitter .....................133
Unleaded Gasoline .......................316
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............41
VanityMirrors...........................77
Variance, Compass .......................176
Vehicle Certification Label .................323
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................294,323,325
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .......................235,407
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................374
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............106
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..................338
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............156
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................438
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................380
Washers, Windshield ................125,126,380
Washing Vehicle .........................395
Water
Driving Through ......................270
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................397
10
INDEX 463
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................397
Wind Buffeting .......................33,142
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) .............46,51
Window Fogging ........................235
Windows ..............................32
Power ...............................32
Windshield Defroster ................69,232,233
Windshield Washers ...................125,126
Fluid ...............................380
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................380
Windshield Wipers .......................125
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................380
Wiper,Delay ...........................125
Wipers, Intermittent ......................125
464 INDEX
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTINGYOUR VEHICLE AWORDABOUTYOURKEYS
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)Fob With Integrated KeyIgnition Key RemovalKey-In-Ignition ReminderSENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM Rearming Of The SystemToArmTheSystemTo Disarm The
SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) To Unlock The DoorsTo Lock The DoorsExpress Down Window FeatureTo Open The TrunkUsing The Panic AlarmProgramming Additional TransmittersTransmitter Battery ServiceGeneral
InformationREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM How To Use Remote StartDOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksWINDOWS Power WindowsWind BuffetingTRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE TRUNK SAFETY WARNING Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT
RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)Automatic Locking Mode - If EquippedSeat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver and Front Passenger
Supplemental RestraintSystem(SRS)-AirbagsEvent Data Recorder (EDR)ChildRestraintENGINEBREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS SAFETYTIPSTransporting PassengersExhaust GasSafety ChecksYou Should MakeInsidetheVehiclePeriodic Safety ChecksYou Should
Make Outside the VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror - If EquippedOutside MirrorsOutside Mirrors Folding FeaturePower MirrorsHeated Mirrors - If EquippedVanity MirrorsIlluminated Vanity Mirrors
Slide-On-Rod and Extender Features of Sun Visoruconnect phone - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call Featuresuconnect phone FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your uconnect phoneGeneral InformationVOICE RECOGNITION (VR)
SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition (VR) System OperationCommandsVoiceTrainingSEATS Easy Entry SeatsPower SeatsManual Front Seatback ReclineLumbar SupportHead RestraintsHeated SeatsFolding Rear SeatTO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS
Headlight SwitchAutomatic Headlights - If EquippedHeadlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only)Headlight Time DelayDaytime Running Lights - If EquippedLights-On ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedMultifunction LeverOverhead Console Map/Reading
LightsInterior LightsWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper SystemMist FeatureWindshield WashersHeadlights On With Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only)TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL To
ActivateTo Set A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary the Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingOVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading LightsSunglasses StorageGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED Programming HomeLinkGate
Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming A Single HomeLink ButtonSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationPOWER SUNROOF - IF EQUIPPED Opening Sunroof - PartiallyOpening Sunroof - ExpressClosing Sunroof - PartiallyClosing
Sunroof - ExpressPinchProtectFeaturePinchProtectOverrideVenting Sunroof - ExpressSunshade OperationWind BuffetingSunroofMaintenanceIgnitionOffOperationSunroof Fully ClosedELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS CUPHOLDERS FrontCupholdersRearCupholders
CONSOLE FEATURESSlidingCenterConsoleArmrestConsoleStorageREARWINDOWFEATURES Rear Window DefrosterUNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL INSTRUMENT PANELFEATURES INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) DisplaysEngine Oil Change Indicator SystemTrip FunctionsKeyless Go Display - If EquippedCompass Display
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) - If EquippedSystem Warnings (Customer Information Features)Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)SALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating
Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMAAudio Play)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)SALES CODE (RER/REN) - AM/FM/CD/DVD
RADIO - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Voice Recognition System (VR) - If EquippedOperating Instructions - uconnect phone - If EquippedClock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating
Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio PlayNotes on Playing MP3 FilesOperation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeSALES CODE RES/RSC - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) - IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The iPodUsing This FeatureControlling The iPod Using Radio ButtonsPlay ModeList Or Browse Modeuconnect studios (SATELLITE RADIO) - IF EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY) System ActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)Selecting uconnect studios (Satellite) ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - uconnect studios (Satellite) ModeOperating Instructions - uconnect phone (If Equipped)KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH
DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) - IF EQUIPPED REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
Operating TipsSTARTINGAND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission - If EquippedAutomatic Transmission - If EquippedKeyless Go - If EquippedNormal StartingExtremely Cold Weather (Below -20 degrees F or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails To
StartAfter StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER - IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION - IF EQUIPPED Six-Speed Manual TransmissionAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - IF EQUIPPED General InformationBrake/Transmission Shift Interlock SystemBrake/Transmission
Interlock Manual OverrideFour-Speed Automatic Transmission (3.5L Engine)Five-Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L Engine)Gear RangesAUTOSTICK - IF EQUIPPED Autostick OperationDRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES AccelerationTractionDRIVING THROUGH
WATERFlowing/Rising WaterPOWER STEERING Power SteeringFluidCheckPARKING BRAKE Manual Transmission-IfEquippedAutomatic Transmission - IfEquippedBRAKESYSTEMAnti-LockBrakeSystem (ABS) - If EquippedMULTI-DISPLACEMENTSYSTEM(MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) - 5.7L ENGINE ONLY ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) - If EquippedTCS (Traction Control System) - If EquippedBAS (Brake Assist System) - If EquippedHSA (Hill Start Assist) - Manual Transmission OnlyESP
(Electronic Stability Program) - If EquippedSynchronizing ESPESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP/TCS Indicator LightTIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation
PressuresRadial Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife Of TireReplacement TiresTIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) Base SystemPremium
System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS 3.5L and 5.7L Engines (with Automatic Transmission)5.7L Engine (with Manual Transmission)Reformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsE-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesMMT In Gasoline
Materials Added to FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageVEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification LabelGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
OverloadingLoadingTRAILER TOWING Common TowingDefinitionsTrailerHitchClassificationTrailerTowing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIESHAZARD WARNINGFLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSTIREFITTIREREPAIR - IF EQUIPPED JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location/Spare Tire StowagePreparations For JackingJacking and Changing a TireCompact
Spare TireWheelCoverorCenterCapInstallation(IfEquipped)JUMP-STARTING FREEING ASTUCKVEHICLETOWINGA DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition KeyTowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle(FlatTowing WithAllFourWheelsOnTheGround)Towing
This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow DollyMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 5.7L ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler CapEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterEngine Air Cleaner FilterMaintenance-Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenanceBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesAdding Washer FluidExhaust
SystemCooling SystemBrake SystemClutch Hydraulic System - Manual Transmission (If Equipped)Manual Transmission - If EquippedAutomatic Transmission - If EquippedRear AxleAppearance Care and Protection from CorrosionFUSES Integrated Power Module (IPM)
Rear Power Distribution CenterVEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp - Models with Halogen Headlamps - If EquippedLow Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp - Models with High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps - If EquippedFront/Rear Side Marker LampTail/Turn and Stop LampCenter Tail/Backup LampCenter High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)License LampFLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS,
LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Chrysler LLC Customer CenterChrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterIn Mexico ContactCustomer Assistance For The
Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)Service ContractWARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.CIn CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2009 CHALLENGER
CHALLENGER
Chrysler LLC
81-226-0916 Third
Edition Printed in U.S.A.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2009
147914 Dodge LC22 Challenger.indd 1 9/8/08 3:39:42 PM
